1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 217 */ 218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 224 }; 225 226 /** 227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 228 * 229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 231 * 232 * @def: the channel definition 233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 242 */ 243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 246 247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 248 249 bool radar_enabled; 250 251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 252 }; 253 254 /** 255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 258 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 266 * for changes/removal.) 267 */ 268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 275 * 276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 279 * done. 280 * 281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 285 */ 286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 291 }; 292 293 /** 294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 295 * 296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 298 * 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 300 * also implies a change in the AID. 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 310 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 324 * changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 329 * context had been assigned. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 333 * keep alive) changed. 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 342 * status changed. 343 * 344 */ 345 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 346 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 350 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 351 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 352 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 353 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 356 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 357 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 358 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 359 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 360 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 361 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 362 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 363 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 364 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 365 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 366 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 367 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 368 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 369 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 370 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 371 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 372 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 373 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 376 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 377 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 378 379 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 380 }; 381 382 /* 383 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 384 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 385 * filtering will be disabled. 386 */ 387 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 388 389 /** 390 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 391 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 392 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 393 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 394 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 395 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 396 * once each time the timeout triggers. 397 */ 398 enum ieee80211_event_type { 399 RSSI_EVENT, 400 MLME_EVENT, 401 BAR_RX_EVENT, 402 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 403 }; 404 405 /** 406 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 407 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 408 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 411 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 412 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 413 }; 414 415 /** 416 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 417 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 418 */ 419 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 420 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 421 }; 422 423 /** 424 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 425 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 426 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 427 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 428 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 429 */ 430 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 431 AUTH_EVENT, 432 ASSOC_EVENT, 433 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 434 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 435 }; 436 437 /** 438 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 439 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 440 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 441 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 442 */ 443 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 444 MLME_SUCCESS, 445 MLME_DENIED, 446 MLME_TIMEOUT, 447 }; 448 449 /** 450 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 451 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 452 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 453 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 454 */ 455 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 456 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 458 u16 reason; 459 }; 460 461 /** 462 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 463 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 464 * @tid: the tid 465 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 466 */ 467 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 468 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 469 u16 tid; 470 u16 ssn; 471 }; 472 473 /** 474 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 475 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 476 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 477 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 478 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 479 * @u:union holding the fields above 480 */ 481 struct ieee80211_event { 482 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 483 union { 484 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 485 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 486 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 487 } u; 488 }; 489 490 /** 491 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 492 * 493 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 494 * 495 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 496 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 497 */ 498 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 499 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 500 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 501 }; 502 503 /** 504 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 505 * 506 * @lci: LCI subelement content 507 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 508 * @lci_len: LCI data length 509 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 510 */ 511 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 512 const u8 *lci; 513 const u8 *civicloc; 514 size_t lci_len; 515 size_t civicloc_len; 516 }; 517 518 /** 519 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 520 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 521 * 522 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 523 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 526 u32 min_interval; 527 u32 max_interval; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 532 * 533 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 534 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 535 * 536 * @addr: (link) address used locally 537 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 538 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 539 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 540 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 541 * ACK, BACK or both 542 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 543 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 544 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 545 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 546 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 547 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 548 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 549 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 550 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 551 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 552 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 553 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 554 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 555 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 556 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 557 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 558 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 559 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 560 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 561 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 562 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 563 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 564 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 565 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 566 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 567 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 568 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 569 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 570 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 571 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 572 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 573 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 574 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 575 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 576 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 577 * the current band. 578 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 579 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 580 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 581 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 582 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 583 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 584 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 585 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 586 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 587 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 588 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 589 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 590 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 591 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 592 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 593 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 594 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 595 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 596 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 597 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 598 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 599 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 600 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 601 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 602 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 603 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 604 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 605 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 606 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 607 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 608 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 609 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 610 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 611 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 612 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 613 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 614 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 615 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 616 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 617 * station. 618 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 619 * responder functionality. 620 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 621 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 622 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 623 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 624 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 625 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 626 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 627 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 628 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 629 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 630 * connected to (STA) 631 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 632 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 633 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 634 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 635 * interval. 636 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 637 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 638 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 639 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 640 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 641 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 642 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 643 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 644 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 645 * for read access. 646 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 647 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 648 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 649 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 650 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 651 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 652 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is 653 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 654 * for read access. 655 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 656 */ 657 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 658 const u8 *bssid; 659 unsigned int link_id; 660 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 661 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 662 bool uora_exists; 663 u8 uora_ocw_range; 664 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 665 bool he_support; 666 bool twt_requester; 667 bool twt_responder; 668 bool twt_protected; 669 bool twt_broadcast; 670 /* erp related data */ 671 bool use_cts_prot; 672 bool use_short_preamble; 673 bool use_short_slot; 674 bool enable_beacon; 675 u8 dtim_period; 676 u16 beacon_int; 677 u16 assoc_capability; 678 u64 sync_tsf; 679 u32 sync_device_ts; 680 u8 sync_dtim_count; 681 u32 basic_rates; 682 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 683 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 684 u16 ht_operation_mode; 685 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 686 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 687 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 688 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 689 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 690 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 691 bool qos; 692 bool hidden_ssid; 693 int txpower; 694 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 695 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 696 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 697 u16 max_idle_period; 698 bool protected_keep_alive; 699 bool ftm_responder; 700 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 701 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 702 bool nontransmitted; 703 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 704 u8 bssid_index; 705 u8 bssid_indicator; 706 bool ema_ap; 707 u8 profile_periodicity; 708 struct { 709 u32 params; 710 u16 nss_set; 711 } he_oper; 712 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 713 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 714 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 715 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 716 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 717 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 718 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 719 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 720 u8 pwr_reduction; 721 bool eht_support; 722 723 bool csa_active; 724 bool mu_mimo_owner; 725 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 726 727 bool color_change_active; 728 u8 color_change_color; 729 }; 730 731 /** 732 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 733 * 734 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 735 * 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 738 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 739 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 740 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 741 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 742 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 743 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 744 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 745 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 746 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 747 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 750 * station 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 755 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 756 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 757 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 758 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 759 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 760 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 761 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 762 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 763 * hardware queue. 764 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 766 * is for the whole aggregation. 767 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 768 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 769 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 770 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 771 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 773 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 774 * off-channel operation. 775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 776 * (header conversion) 777 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 778 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 780 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 782 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 783 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 785 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 786 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 787 * queue gets full. 788 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 789 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 790 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 791 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 792 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 793 * should kick the MLME state machine. 794 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 795 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 796 * status to user space) 797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 798 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 799 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 801 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 802 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 803 * handled properly by the device. 804 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 805 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 806 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 807 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 808 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 809 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 810 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 811 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 812 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 813 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 814 * PS-Poll responses. 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 816 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 817 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 819 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 820 * monitor injection). 821 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 822 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 823 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 824 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 825 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 826 * 827 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 828 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 829 */ 830 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 839 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 840 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 844 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 846 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 847 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 848 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 849 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 850 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 851 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 852 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 853 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 854 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 855 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 856 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 857 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 858 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 859 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 860 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 861 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 862 }; 863 864 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 865 866 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 867 868 /** 869 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 870 * 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 872 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 873 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 874 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 879 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 880 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 881 * it can be sent out. 882 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 883 * has already been assigned to this frame. 884 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 885 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 886 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 888 * for sequence number assignment 889 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 890 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 891 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 892 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 893 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 894 * it's intended for an MLD. 895 * 896 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 897 */ 898 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 899 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 900 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 901 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 902 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 903 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 904 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 905 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 906 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 907 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 908 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 909 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 910 }; 911 912 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 913 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 914 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 915 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 916 917 /** 918 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 919 * 920 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 921 * 922 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 923 */ 924 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 925 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 926 }; 927 928 /* 929 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 930 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 931 */ 932 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 933 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 934 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 935 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 936 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 937 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 938 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 939 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 940 941 /** 942 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 943 * Rate Control algorithm. 944 * 945 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 946 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 947 * 948 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 949 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 950 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 951 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 952 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 953 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 954 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 955 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 956 * Greenfield mode. 957 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 958 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 959 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 960 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 961 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 962 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 963 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 964 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 965 */ 966 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 967 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 968 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 969 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 970 971 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 972 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 973 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 974 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 975 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 976 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 977 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 978 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 979 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 980 }; 981 982 983 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 984 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 985 986 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 987 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 988 989 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 990 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 991 992 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 993 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 994 995 /** 996 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 997 * 998 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 999 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1000 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1001 * 1002 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1003 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1004 * 1005 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1006 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1007 * 1008 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1009 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1010 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1011 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1012 * information:: 1013 * 1014 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1015 * 1016 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1017 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1018 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1019 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1020 * information should then contain:: 1021 * 1022 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1023 * 1024 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1025 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1026 */ 1027 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1028 s8 idx; 1029 u16 count:5, 1030 flags:11; 1031 } __packed; 1032 1033 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1034 1035 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1036 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1037 { 1038 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1039 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1040 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1041 } 1042 1043 static inline u8 1044 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1045 { 1046 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1047 } 1048 1049 static inline u8 1050 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1051 { 1052 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1053 } 1054 1055 /** 1056 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1057 * 1058 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1059 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1060 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1061 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1062 * 1063 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1064 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1065 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1066 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1067 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1068 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1069 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1070 * @control: union part for control data 1071 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1072 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1073 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1074 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1075 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1076 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1077 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1078 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1079 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1080 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1081 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1082 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1083 * @pad: padding 1084 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1085 * @status: union part for status data 1086 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1087 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1088 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1089 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1090 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1091 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1092 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1093 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1094 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1095 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1096 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1097 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1098 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1099 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1100 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1101 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1102 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1103 */ 1104 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1105 /* common information */ 1106 u32 flags; 1107 u32 band:3, 1108 ack_frame_id:13, 1109 hw_queue:4, 1110 tx_time_est:10; 1111 /* 2 free bits */ 1112 1113 union { 1114 struct { 1115 union { 1116 /* rate control */ 1117 struct { 1118 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1119 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1120 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1121 u8 use_rts:1; 1122 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1123 u8 short_preamble:1; 1124 u8 skip_table:1; 1125 /* 2 bytes free */ 1126 }; 1127 /* only needed before rate control */ 1128 unsigned long jiffies; 1129 }; 1130 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1132 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1133 u32 flags; 1134 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1135 } control; 1136 struct { 1137 u64 cookie; 1138 } ack; 1139 struct { 1140 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1141 s32 ack_signal; 1142 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1143 u8 ampdu_len; 1144 u8 antenna; 1145 u16 tx_time; 1146 u8 flags; 1147 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)]; 1148 } status; 1149 struct { 1150 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1151 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1152 u8 pad[4]; 1153 1154 void *rate_driver_data[ 1155 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1156 }; 1157 void *driver_data[ 1158 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1159 }; 1160 }; 1161 1162 static inline u16 1163 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1164 { 1165 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1166 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1167 */ 1168 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1169 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1170 } 1171 1172 static inline u16 1173 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1174 { 1175 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1176 } 1177 1178 /*** 1179 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1180 * 1181 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1182 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1183 * 1184 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1185 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1186 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1187 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1188 * that was used when sending the packet. 1189 */ 1190 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1191 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1192 u8 try_count; 1193 u8 tx_power_idx; 1194 }; 1195 1196 /** 1197 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1198 * 1199 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1200 * @info: Basic tx status information 1201 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1202 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1203 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1204 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1205 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1206 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1207 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1208 */ 1209 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1210 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1211 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1212 struct sk_buff *skb; 1213 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1214 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1215 u8 n_rates; 1216 1217 struct list_head *free_list; 1218 }; 1219 1220 /** 1221 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1222 * 1223 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1224 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1225 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1226 * 1227 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1228 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1229 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1230 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1231 */ 1232 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1233 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1234 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1235 const u8 *common_ies; 1236 size_t common_ie_len; 1237 }; 1238 1239 1240 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1241 { 1242 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1243 } 1244 1245 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1246 { 1247 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1248 } 1249 1250 /** 1251 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1252 * 1253 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1254 * 1255 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1256 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1257 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1258 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1259 * 1260 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1261 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1262 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1263 */ 1264 static inline void 1265 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1266 { 1267 int i; 1268 1269 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1270 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1271 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1272 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1273 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1274 /* clear the rate counts */ 1275 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1276 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1277 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1278 } 1279 1280 1281 /** 1282 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1283 * 1284 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1285 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1286 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1287 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1288 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1289 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1290 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1291 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1292 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1293 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1294 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1295 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1296 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1297 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1298 * de-duplication by itself. 1299 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1300 * the frame. 1301 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1302 * the frame. 1303 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1304 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1305 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1306 * merging. 1307 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1308 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1309 * (including FCS) was received. 1310 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1311 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1312 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1313 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1314 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1315 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1316 * each A-MPDU 1317 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1318 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1319 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1320 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1321 * on this subframe 1322 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1323 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1324 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1325 * done by the hardware 1326 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1327 * processing it in any regular way. 1328 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1329 * them for sniffing purposes. 1330 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1331 * monitor interfaces. 1332 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1333 * them for sniffing purposes. 1334 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1335 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1336 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1337 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1338 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1339 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1340 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1341 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1342 * interleaved with other frames. 1343 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1344 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1345 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1346 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1347 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1348 * the first subframe. 1349 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1350 * be done in the hardware. 1351 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1352 * frame 1353 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1354 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1355 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1356 * 1357 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1358 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1359 * - DATA3_CODING 1360 * - DATA5_GI 1361 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1362 * - DATA6_NSTS 1363 * - DATA3_STBC 1364 * 1365 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1366 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1367 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1368 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1369 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1370 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1371 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1372 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1373 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1374 * hardware or driver) 1375 */ 1376 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1377 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1378 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1379 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1380 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1381 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1382 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1383 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1384 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1385 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1386 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1387 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1388 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1389 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1390 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1391 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1392 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1393 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1394 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1395 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1396 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1397 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1398 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1399 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1400 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1401 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1402 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1403 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1404 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1405 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1406 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1407 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1408 }; 1409 1410 /** 1411 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1412 * 1413 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1414 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1415 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1416 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1417 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1418 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1419 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1420 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1421 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1422 */ 1423 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1424 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1425 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1426 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1427 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1428 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1429 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1430 }; 1431 1432 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1433 1434 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1435 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1436 RX_ENC_HT, 1437 RX_ENC_VHT, 1438 RX_ENC_HE, 1439 }; 1440 1441 /** 1442 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1443 * 1444 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1445 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1446 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1447 * 1448 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1449 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1450 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1451 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1452 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1453 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1454 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1455 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1456 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1457 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1458 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1459 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1460 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1461 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1462 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1463 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1464 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1465 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1466 * values were filled. 1467 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1468 * support dB or unspecified units) 1469 * @antenna: antenna used 1470 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1471 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1472 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1473 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1474 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1475 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1476 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1477 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1478 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1479 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1480 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1481 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1482 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1483 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1484 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1485 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1486 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1487 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1488 * @link_valid. 1489 */ 1490 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1491 u64 mactime; 1492 union { 1493 u64 boottime_ns; 1494 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1495 }; 1496 u32 device_timestamp; 1497 u32 ampdu_reference; 1498 u32 flag; 1499 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1500 u8 enc_flags; 1501 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1502 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1503 u8 rate_idx; 1504 u8 nss; 1505 u8 rx_flags; 1506 u8 band; 1507 u8 antenna; 1508 s8 signal; 1509 u8 chains; 1510 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1511 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1512 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1513 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1514 }; 1515 1516 static inline u32 1517 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1518 { 1519 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1520 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1521 } 1522 1523 /** 1524 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1525 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1526 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1527 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1528 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1529 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1530 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1531 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1532 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1533 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1534 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1535 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1536 * @data field. 1537 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1538 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1539 * length 1540 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1541 * 1542 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1543 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1544 * data. 1545 */ 1546 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1547 u32 present; 1548 u8 align; 1549 u8 oui[3]; 1550 u8 subns; 1551 u8 pad; 1552 u16 len; 1553 u8 data[]; 1554 } __packed; 1555 1556 /** 1557 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1558 * 1559 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1560 * 1561 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1562 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1563 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1564 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1565 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1566 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1567 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1568 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1569 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1570 * for more. 1571 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1572 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1573 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1574 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1575 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1576 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1577 * operating channel. 1578 */ 1579 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1580 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1581 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1582 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1583 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1584 }; 1585 1586 1587 /** 1588 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1589 * 1590 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1591 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1592 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1593 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1594 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1595 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1596 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1597 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1598 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1599 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1600 */ 1601 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1602 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1603 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1604 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1605 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1606 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1607 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1608 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1609 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1610 }; 1611 1612 /** 1613 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1614 * 1615 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1616 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1617 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1618 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1619 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1620 */ 1621 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1622 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1623 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1624 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1625 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1626 1627 /* keep last */ 1628 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1629 }; 1630 1631 /** 1632 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1633 * 1634 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1635 * 1636 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1637 * 1638 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1639 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1640 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1641 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1642 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1643 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1644 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1645 * 1646 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1647 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1648 * 1649 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1650 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1651 * 1652 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1653 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1654 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1655 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1656 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1657 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1658 * 1659 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1660 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1661 * configured for an HT channel. 1662 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1663 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1664 */ 1665 struct ieee80211_conf { 1666 u32 flags; 1667 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1668 1669 u16 listen_interval; 1670 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1671 1672 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1673 1674 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1675 bool radar_enabled; 1676 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1677 }; 1678 1679 /** 1680 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1681 * 1682 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1683 * operation. 1684 * 1685 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1686 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1687 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1688 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1689 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1690 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1691 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1692 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1693 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1694 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1695 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1696 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1697 * channel, expressed in TU. 1698 */ 1699 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1700 u64 timestamp; 1701 u32 device_timestamp; 1702 bool block_tx; 1703 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1704 u8 count; 1705 u32 delay; 1706 }; 1707 1708 /** 1709 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1710 * 1711 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1712 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1713 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1714 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1715 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1716 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1717 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1718 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1719 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1720 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1721 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1722 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1723 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1724 */ 1725 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1726 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1727 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1728 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1729 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1730 }; 1731 1732 1733 /** 1734 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1735 * 1736 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1737 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1738 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1739 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1740 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1741 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1742 * mac80211. 1743 */ 1744 1745 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1746 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1747 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1748 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1749 }; 1750 1751 /** 1752 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1753 * @assoc: association status 1754 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1755 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1756 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1757 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1758 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1759 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1760 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1761 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1762 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1763 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1764 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1765 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1766 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1767 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1768 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1769 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1770 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1771 * your driver/device needs to do. 1772 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1773 * (station mode only) 1774 */ 1775 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1776 /* association related data */ 1777 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1778 bool ibss_creator; 1779 bool ps; 1780 u16 aid; 1781 1782 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1783 int arp_addr_cnt; 1784 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1785 size_t ssid_len; 1786 bool s1g; 1787 bool idle; 1788 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1789 }; 1790 1791 /** 1792 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1793 * 1794 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1795 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1796 * 1797 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1798 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1799 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1800 * or the BSS we're associated to 1801 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1802 * indexed by link ID 1803 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1804 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1805 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1806 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1807 * @addr: address of this interface 1808 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1809 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1810 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1811 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 1812 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 1813 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 1814 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1815 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1816 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1817 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1818 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1819 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1820 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1821 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1822 * restrictions. 1823 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1824 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1825 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1826 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1827 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1828 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1829 * interface. 1830 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1831 * for this interface. 1832 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1833 * sizeof(void \*). 1834 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 1835 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1836 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1837 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1838 */ 1839 struct ieee80211_vif { 1840 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1841 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1842 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1843 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1844 u16 valid_links, active_links; 1845 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1846 bool p2p; 1847 1848 u8 cab_queue; 1849 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1850 1851 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1852 1853 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 1854 u32 driver_flags; 1855 u32 offload_flags; 1856 1857 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1858 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1859 #endif 1860 1861 bool probe_req_reg; 1862 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1863 1864 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1865 1866 /* must be last */ 1867 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1868 }; 1869 1870 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 1871 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 1872 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 1873 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 1874 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id]))) 1875 1876 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1877 { 1878 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1879 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1880 #endif 1881 return false; 1882 } 1883 1884 /** 1885 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1886 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1887 * 1888 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1889 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1890 * 1891 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1892 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1893 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1894 */ 1895 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1896 1897 /** 1898 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1899 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1900 * 1901 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1902 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1903 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1904 */ 1905 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1906 1907 /** 1908 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners 1909 * @vif: the interface to check 1910 */ 1911 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1912 { 1913 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx); 1914 } 1915 1916 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 1917 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1918 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1919 1920 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 1921 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1922 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1923 1924 /** 1925 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1926 * 1927 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1928 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1929 * 1930 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1931 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1932 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1933 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1934 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1935 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1936 * generation in software. 1937 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1938 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1939 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1940 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1941 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1942 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1943 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1944 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1945 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1946 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1947 * MIC. 1948 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1949 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1950 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1951 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1952 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1953 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1954 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1955 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1956 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1957 * only for management frames (MFP). 1958 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1959 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1960 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1961 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1962 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1963 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1964 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1965 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1966 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1967 * generation only 1968 */ 1969 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1970 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1971 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1972 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1973 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1974 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1975 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1976 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1977 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1978 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1979 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1980 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1981 }; 1982 1983 /** 1984 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1985 * 1986 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1987 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1988 * 1989 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1990 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1991 * encrypted in hardware. 1992 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1993 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1994 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1995 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1996 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1997 * @keylen: key material length 1998 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1999 * data block: 2000 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2001 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2002 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2003 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2004 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2005 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2006 */ 2007 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2008 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2009 u32 cipher; 2010 u8 icv_len; 2011 u8 iv_len; 2012 u8 hw_key_idx; 2013 s8 keyidx; 2014 u16 flags; 2015 s8 link_id; 2016 u8 keylen; 2017 u8 key[]; 2018 }; 2019 2020 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2021 2022 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2023 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2024 2025 /** 2026 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2027 * 2028 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2029 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2030 * reverse order than in packet) 2031 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2032 * reverse order than in packet) 2033 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2034 * reverse order than in packet) 2035 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2036 * reverse order than in packet) 2037 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2038 */ 2039 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2040 union { 2041 struct { 2042 u32 iv32; 2043 u16 iv16; 2044 } tkip; 2045 struct { 2046 u8 pn[6]; 2047 } ccmp; 2048 struct { 2049 u8 pn[6]; 2050 } aes_cmac; 2051 struct { 2052 u8 pn[6]; 2053 } aes_gmac; 2054 struct { 2055 u8 pn[6]; 2056 } gcmp; 2057 struct { 2058 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2059 u8 seq_len; 2060 } hw; 2061 }; 2062 }; 2063 2064 /** 2065 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2066 * 2067 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2068 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2069 * 2070 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2071 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2072 */ 2073 enum set_key_cmd { 2074 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2075 }; 2076 2077 /** 2078 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2079 * 2080 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2081 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2082 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2083 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2084 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2085 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2086 */ 2087 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2088 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2089 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2090 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2091 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2092 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2093 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2094 }; 2095 2096 /** 2097 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2098 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2099 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2100 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2101 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2102 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2103 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2104 * 2105 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2106 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2107 */ 2108 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2109 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2110 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2111 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2112 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2113 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2114 }; 2115 2116 /** 2117 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2118 * 2119 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2120 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2121 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2122 */ 2123 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2124 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2125 struct { 2126 s8 idx; 2127 u8 count; 2128 u8 count_cts; 2129 u8 count_rts; 2130 u16 flags; 2131 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2132 }; 2133 2134 /** 2135 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2136 * 2137 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2138 * 2139 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2140 * to the STA. 2141 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2142 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2143 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2144 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2145 * per peer TPC. 2146 */ 2147 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2148 s16 power; 2149 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2150 }; 2151 2152 /** 2153 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2154 * 2155 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2156 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2157 * 2158 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2159 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2160 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2161 * 2162 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2163 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2164 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2165 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2166 * 2167 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2168 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2169 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2170 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2171 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2172 */ 2173 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2174 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2175 2176 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2177 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2178 }; 2179 2180 /** 2181 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2182 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2183 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2184 * 2185 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2186 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2187 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2188 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2189 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2190 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2191 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2192 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2193 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2194 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2195 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2196 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2197 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2198 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2199 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2200 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2201 * the station moves to associated state. 2202 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2203 * 2204 */ 2205 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2206 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2207 2208 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2209 u8 link_id; 2210 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2211 2212 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2213 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2214 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2215 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2216 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2217 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2218 2219 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2220 2221 u8 rx_nss; 2222 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2223 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2224 }; 2225 2226 /** 2227 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2228 * 2229 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2230 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2231 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2232 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2233 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2234 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2235 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2236 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2237 * 2238 * @addr: MAC address 2239 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2240 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2241 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2242 * Can be modified by driver. 2243 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2244 * otherwise always false) 2245 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2246 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2247 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2248 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2249 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2250 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2251 * @rates: rate control selection table 2252 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2253 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2254 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2255 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2256 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2257 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2258 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2259 * unlimited. 2260 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2261 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2262 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2263 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2264 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2265 * is used for non-data frames 2266 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2267 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2268 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2269 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2270 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2271 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2272 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2273 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2274 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2275 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2276 * by the AP. 2277 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2278 */ 2279 struct ieee80211_sta { 2280 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2281 u16 aid; 2282 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2283 bool wme; 2284 u8 uapsd_queues; 2285 u8 max_sp; 2286 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2287 bool tdls; 2288 bool tdls_initiator; 2289 bool mfp; 2290 bool mlo; 2291 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2292 2293 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2294 2295 bool support_p2p_ps; 2296 2297 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2298 2299 u16 valid_links; 2300 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2301 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2302 2303 /* must be last */ 2304 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2305 }; 2306 2307 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2308 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2309 #else 2310 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2311 { 2312 return true; 2313 } 2314 #endif 2315 2316 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2317 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2318 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2319 2320 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2321 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2322 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2323 2324 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2325 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2326 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2327 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2328 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id))) 2329 2330 /** 2331 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2332 * 2333 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2334 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2335 * 2336 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2337 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2338 */ 2339 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2340 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2341 }; 2342 2343 /** 2344 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2345 * 2346 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2347 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2348 */ 2349 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2350 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2351 }; 2352 2353 /** 2354 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2355 * 2356 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2357 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2358 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2359 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2360 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2361 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2362 * 2363 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2364 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2365 */ 2366 struct ieee80211_txq { 2367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2368 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2369 u8 tid; 2370 u8 ac; 2371 2372 /* must be last */ 2373 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2374 }; 2375 2376 /** 2377 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2378 * 2379 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2380 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2381 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2382 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2383 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2384 * 2385 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2386 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2387 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2388 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2389 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2390 * algorithm. 2391 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2392 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2393 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2394 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2395 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2396 * CCK frames. 2397 * 2398 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2399 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2400 * the FCS at the end. 2401 * 2402 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2403 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2404 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2405 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2406 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2407 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2408 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2409 * 2410 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2411 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2412 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2413 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2414 * 2415 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2416 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2417 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2418 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2419 * 2420 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2421 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2422 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2423 * 2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2425 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2426 * 2427 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2428 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2429 * 2430 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2431 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2432 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2433 * 2434 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2435 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2436 * 2437 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2438 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2439 * 2440 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2441 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2442 * the stack. 2443 * 2444 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2445 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2446 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2447 * 2448 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2449 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2450 * dtim_period). 2451 * 2452 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2453 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2454 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2455 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2456 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2457 * only in that case. 2458 * 2459 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2460 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2461 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2462 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2463 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2464 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2465 * 2466 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2467 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2468 * software. 2469 * 2470 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2471 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2472 * active interfaces. 2473 * 2474 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2475 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2476 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2477 * 2478 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2479 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2480 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2481 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2482 * supported cipher suites. 2483 * 2484 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2485 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2486 * for frames. 2487 * 2488 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2489 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2490 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2491 * control for more details. 2492 * 2493 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2494 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2495 * 2496 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2497 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2498 * is supported. 2499 * 2500 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2501 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2502 * 2503 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2504 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2505 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2506 * 2507 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2508 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2509 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2510 * CSA frame. 2511 * 2512 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2513 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2514 * 2515 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2516 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2517 * 2518 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2519 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2520 * 2521 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2522 * within A-MPDU. 2523 * 2524 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2525 * for sent beacons. 2526 * 2527 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2528 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2529 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2530 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2531 * 2532 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2533 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2534 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2535 * timeout. 2536 * 2537 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2538 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2539 * 2540 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2541 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2542 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2543 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2544 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2545 * 2546 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2547 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2548 * 2549 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2550 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2551 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2552 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2553 * 2554 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2555 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2556 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2557 * 2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2559 * TDLS links. 2560 * 2561 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2562 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2563 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2564 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2565 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2566 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2567 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2568 * 2569 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2570 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2571 * 2572 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2573 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2574 * 2575 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2576 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2577 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2578 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2579 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2580 * 2581 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2582 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2583 * TXQs to start with. 2584 * 2585 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2586 * length in tx status information 2587 * 2588 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2589 * 2590 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2591 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2592 * 2593 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2594 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2595 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2596 * 2597 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2598 * offload 2599 * 2600 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2601 * offload 2602 * 2603 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2604 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2605 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2606 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2607 * the stack. 2608 * 2609 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2610 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2611 * 2612 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2613 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2614 * 2615 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2616 */ 2617 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2618 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2619 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2620 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2621 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2622 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2623 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2624 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2625 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2626 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2627 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2628 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2629 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2630 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2631 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2632 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2633 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2634 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2635 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2636 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2637 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2638 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2639 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2640 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2641 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2642 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2643 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2644 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2645 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2646 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2647 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2648 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2649 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2650 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2651 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2652 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2653 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2654 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2655 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2656 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2657 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2658 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2659 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2660 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2661 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2662 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2663 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2664 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2665 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2666 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2667 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2668 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2669 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2670 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2671 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2672 2673 /* keep last, obviously */ 2674 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2675 }; 2676 2677 /** 2678 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2679 * 2680 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2681 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2682 * 2683 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2684 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2685 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2686 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2687 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2688 * 2689 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2690 * 2691 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2692 * along with this structure. 2693 * 2694 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2695 * 2696 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2697 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2698 * 2699 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2700 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2701 * 2702 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2703 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2704 * 2705 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2706 * that HW supports 2707 * 2708 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2709 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2710 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2711 * 2712 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2713 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2714 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2715 * 2716 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2717 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2718 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2719 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2720 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2721 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2722 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2723 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2724 * 2725 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2726 * can handle. 2727 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2728 * the hw can report back. 2729 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2730 * 2731 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2732 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2733 * aggregation. 2734 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2735 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2736 * it shouldn't be set. 2737 * 2738 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2739 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2740 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2741 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2742 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2743 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2744 * 2745 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2746 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2747 * 2748 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2749 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2750 * 2751 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2752 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2753 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2754 * adding _BW is supported today. 2755 * 2756 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2757 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2758 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2759 * 2760 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2761 * 2762 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2763 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2764 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2765 * device_timestamp. 2766 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2767 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2768 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2769 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2770 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2771 * 2772 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2773 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2774 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2775 * 2776 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2777 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2778 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2779 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2780 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2781 * neither enabled. 2782 * 2783 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2784 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2785 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2786 * 2787 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2788 * device. 2789 * 2790 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2791 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2792 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2793 * 2794 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2795 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2796 * 2797 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2798 * 2799 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2800 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2801 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2802 * 2803 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2804 */ 2805 struct ieee80211_hw { 2806 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2807 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2808 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2809 void *priv; 2810 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2811 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2812 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2813 int vif_data_size; 2814 int sta_data_size; 2815 int chanctx_data_size; 2816 int txq_data_size; 2817 u16 queues; 2818 u16 max_listen_interval; 2819 s8 max_signal; 2820 u8 max_rates; 2821 u8 max_report_rates; 2822 u8 max_rate_tries; 2823 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2824 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2825 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2826 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2827 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2828 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2829 struct { 2830 int units_pos; 2831 s16 accuracy; 2832 } radiotap_timestamp; 2833 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2834 u8 uapsd_queues; 2835 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2836 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2837 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2838 u8 weight_multiplier; 2839 u32 max_mtu; 2840 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2841 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2842 }; 2843 2844 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2845 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2846 { 2847 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2848 } 2849 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2850 2851 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2852 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2853 { 2854 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2855 } 2856 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2857 2858 /** 2859 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2860 * 2861 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2862 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2863 */ 2864 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2865 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2866 2867 /* Keep last */ 2868 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2869 }; 2870 2871 /** 2872 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2873 * 2874 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2875 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2876 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2877 * @status: channel-switch response status 2878 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2879 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2880 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2881 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2882 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2883 */ 2884 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2885 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2886 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2887 u8 action_code; 2888 u32 status; 2889 u32 timestamp; 2890 u16 switch_time; 2891 u16 switch_timeout; 2892 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2893 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2894 }; 2895 2896 /** 2897 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2898 * 2899 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2900 * 2901 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2902 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2903 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2904 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2905 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2906 * 2907 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2908 */ 2909 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2910 2911 /** 2912 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2913 * 2914 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2915 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2916 */ 2917 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2918 { 2919 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2920 } 2921 2922 /** 2923 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2924 * 2925 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2926 * @addr: the address to set 2927 */ 2928 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2929 { 2930 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2931 } 2932 2933 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2934 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2935 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2936 { 2937 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2938 return NULL; 2939 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2940 } 2941 2942 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2943 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2944 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2945 { 2946 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2947 return NULL; 2948 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2949 } 2950 2951 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2952 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2953 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2954 { 2955 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2956 return NULL; 2957 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2958 } 2959 2960 /** 2961 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2962 * @hw: the hardware 2963 * @skb: the skb 2964 * 2965 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2966 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2967 */ 2968 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2969 2970 /** 2971 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2972 * 2973 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2974 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2975 * 2976 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2977 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2978 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2979 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2980 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2981 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2982 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2983 * 2984 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2985 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2986 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2987 * 2988 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2989 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2990 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2991 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2992 * 2993 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2994 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2995 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2996 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2997 * 2998 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2999 * 3000 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3001 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 3002 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3003 * based on the receive flags. 3004 * 3005 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3006 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3007 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3008 * keys. 3009 * 3010 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3011 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3012 * handler. 3013 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3014 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3015 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3016 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3017 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3018 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3019 * 3020 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3021 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3022 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3023 * 3024 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3025 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3026 * requirements: 3027 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3028 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3029 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3030 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3031 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3032 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3033 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3034 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3035 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3036 */ 3037 3038 /** 3039 * DOC: Powersave support 3040 * 3041 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3042 * 3043 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 3044 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3045 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3046 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3047 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3048 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3049 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3050 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3051 * 3052 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3053 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3054 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3055 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3056 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3057 * 3058 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3059 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3060 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3061 * 3062 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3063 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3064 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3065 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3066 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3067 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3068 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3069 * 3070 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3071 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3072 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3073 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 3074 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3075 * periods. 3076 * 3077 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3078 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3079 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3080 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3081 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3082 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3083 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3084 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3085 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3086 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3087 * 3088 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3089 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3090 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3091 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3092 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3093 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3094 * 3095 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3096 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3097 */ 3098 3099 /** 3100 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3101 * 3102 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3103 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3104 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3105 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3106 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3107 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3108 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3109 * 3110 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3111 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3112 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3113 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3114 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3115 * 3116 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3117 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3118 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3119 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3120 * 3121 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3122 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3123 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3124 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3125 * 3126 * - a list of information element IDs 3127 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3128 * 3129 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3130 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3131 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3132 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3133 * vendor information elements. 3134 * 3135 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3136 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3137 * 3138 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 3139 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3140 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3141 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3142 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3143 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3144 * 3145 * 3146 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3147 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3148 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3149 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 3150 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3151 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3152 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3153 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3154 * 3155 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3156 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3157 * signal strength threshold checking. 3158 */ 3159 3160 /** 3161 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3162 * 3163 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3164 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3165 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3166 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3167 * 3168 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3169 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3170 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3171 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3172 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3173 * hardware flags. 3174 * 3175 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3176 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3177 * turned off otherwise. 3178 * 3179 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3180 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3181 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3182 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3183 */ 3184 3185 /** 3186 * DOC: Frame filtering 3187 * 3188 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3189 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3190 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3191 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3192 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3193 * 3194 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3195 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3196 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3197 * 3198 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3199 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3200 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3201 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3202 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3203 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3204 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3205 * 3206 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3207 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3208 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3209 * or dropped. 3210 * 3211 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3212 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3213 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3214 * the flag, but not clear it. 3215 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3216 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3217 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3218 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3219 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3220 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3221 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3222 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3223 */ 3224 3225 /** 3226 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3227 * 3228 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3229 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3230 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3231 * 3232 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3233 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3234 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3235 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3236 * the driver code. 3237 * 3238 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3239 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3240 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3241 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3242 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3243 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3244 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3245 * 3246 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3247 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3248 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3249 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3250 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3251 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3252 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3253 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3254 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3255 * @sta_notify callback. 3256 * 3257 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3258 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3259 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3260 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3261 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3262 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3263 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3264 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3265 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3266 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3267 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3268 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3269 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3270 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3271 * 3272 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3273 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3274 * 3275 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3276 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3277 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3278 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3279 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3280 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3281 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3282 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3283 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3284 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3285 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3286 * 3287 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3288 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3289 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3290 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3291 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3292 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3293 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3294 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3295 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3296 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3297 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3298 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3299 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3300 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3301 * 3302 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3303 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3304 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3305 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3306 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3307 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3308 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3309 * 3310 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3311 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3312 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3313 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3314 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3315 * 3316 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3317 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3318 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3319 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3320 */ 3321 3322 /** 3323 * DOC: HW queue control 3324 * 3325 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3326 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3327 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3328 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3329 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3330 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3331 * 3332 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3333 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3334 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3335 * 3336 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3337 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3338 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3339 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3340 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3341 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3342 * the hardware queue. 3343 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3344 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3345 * 3346 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3347 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3348 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3349 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3350 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3351 * 3352 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3353 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3354 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3355 * off-channel queue: 9 3356 * 3357 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3358 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3359 * 3360 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3361 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3362 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3363 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3364 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3365 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3366 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3367 * 3368 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3369 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3370 * 3371 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3372 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3373 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3374 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3375 */ 3376 3377 /** 3378 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3379 * 3380 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3381 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3382 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3383 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3384 * 3385 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3386 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3387 * multicast address. 3388 * 3389 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3390 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3391 * 3392 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3393 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3394 * 3395 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3396 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3397 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3398 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3399 * honour this flag if possible. 3400 * 3401 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3402 * station 3403 * 3404 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3405 * 3406 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3407 * 3408 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3409 * 3410 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3411 */ 3412 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3413 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3414 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3415 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3416 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3417 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3418 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3419 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3420 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3421 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3422 }; 3423 3424 /** 3425 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3426 * 3427 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3428 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3429 * 3430 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3431 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3432 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3433 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3434 * 3435 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3436 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3437 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3438 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3439 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3440 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3441 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3442 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3443 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3444 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3445 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3446 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3447 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3448 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3449 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3450 * session is gone and removes the station. 3451 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3452 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3453 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3454 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3455 */ 3456 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3457 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3458 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3459 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3460 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3461 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3462 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3463 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3464 }; 3465 3466 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3467 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3468 3469 /** 3470 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3471 * 3472 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3473 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3474 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3475 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3476 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3477 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3478 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3479 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3480 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3481 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3482 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3483 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3484 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3485 */ 3486 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3487 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3488 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3489 u16 tid; 3490 u16 ssn; 3491 u16 buf_size; 3492 bool amsdu; 3493 u16 timeout; 3494 }; 3495 3496 /** 3497 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3498 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3499 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3500 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3501 */ 3502 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3503 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3504 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3505 }; 3506 3507 /** 3508 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3509 * 3510 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3511 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3512 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3513 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3514 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3515 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3516 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3517 * the peer. 3518 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3519 * by the peer 3520 */ 3521 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3522 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3523 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3524 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3525 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3526 }; 3527 3528 /** 3529 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3530 * 3531 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3532 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3533 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3534 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3535 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3536 * 3537 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3538 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3539 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3540 */ 3541 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3542 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3543 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3544 }; 3545 3546 /** 3547 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3548 * 3549 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3550 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3551 * 3552 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3553 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3554 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3555 * of wowlan configuration) 3556 */ 3557 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3558 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3559 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3560 }; 3561 3562 /** 3563 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3564 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3565 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3566 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3567 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3568 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3569 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3570 */ 3571 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3572 u16 duration; 3573 u16 subtype; 3574 u8 success:1; 3575 }; 3576 3577 /** 3578 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3579 * 3580 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3581 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3582 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3583 * 3584 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3585 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3586 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3587 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3588 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3589 * Must be atomic. 3590 * 3591 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3592 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3593 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3594 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3595 * or zero. 3596 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3597 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3598 * is added. 3599 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3600 * 3601 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3602 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3603 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3604 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3605 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3606 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3607 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3608 * 3609 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3610 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3611 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3612 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3613 * reconfigured at resume time. 3614 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3615 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3616 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3617 * must return 1 from this function. 3618 * 3619 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3620 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3621 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3622 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3623 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3624 * 3625 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3626 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3627 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3628 * in suspend(). 3629 * 3630 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3631 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3632 * and @stop must be implemented. 3633 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3634 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3635 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3636 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3637 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3638 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3639 * 3640 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3641 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3642 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3643 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3644 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3645 * 3646 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3647 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3648 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3649 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3650 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3651 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3652 * MAC address of the device going away. 3653 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3654 * 3655 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3656 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3657 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3658 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3659 * 3660 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3661 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3662 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3663 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3664 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3665 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3666 * can sleep. 3667 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3668 * are not implemented. 3669 * 3670 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3671 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3672 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3673 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3674 * The callback can sleep. 3675 * 3676 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3677 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3678 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3679 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3680 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3681 * non-MLO connections. 3682 * The callback can sleep. 3683 * 3684 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3685 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3686 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3687 * 3688 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3689 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3690 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3691 * 3692 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3693 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3694 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3695 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3696 * which flags are changed. 3697 * This callback can sleep. 3698 * 3699 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3700 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3701 * 3702 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3703 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3704 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3705 * is enabled. 3706 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3707 * The callback can sleep. 3708 * 3709 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3710 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3711 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3712 * The callback must be atomic. 3713 * 3714 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3715 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3716 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3717 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3718 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3719 * 3720 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3721 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3722 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3723 * 3724 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3725 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3726 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3727 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3728 * that power save is disabled. 3729 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3730 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3731 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3732 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3733 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3734 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3735 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3736 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3737 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3738 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3739 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3740 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3741 * The callback can sleep. 3742 * 3743 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3744 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3745 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3746 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3747 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3748 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3749 * The callback can sleep. 3750 * 3751 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3752 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3753 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3754 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3755 * 3756 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3757 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3758 * 3759 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3760 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3761 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3762 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3763 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3764 * 3765 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3766 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3767 * this notification. 3768 * The callback can sleep. 3769 * 3770 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3771 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3772 * The callback can sleep. 3773 * 3774 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3775 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3776 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3777 * The callback must be atomic. 3778 * 3779 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3780 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3781 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3782 * should be set as well. 3783 * The callback can sleep. 3784 * 3785 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3786 * The callback can sleep. 3787 * 3788 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3789 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3790 * 3791 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3792 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3793 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3794 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3795 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3796 * This callback can sleep. 3797 * 3798 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3799 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3800 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3801 * callback can sleep. 3802 * 3803 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3804 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 3805 * should be within a CPTCFG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3806 * callback can sleep. 3807 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 3808 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3809 * 3810 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3811 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3812 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3813 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3814 * 3815 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3816 * power for the station. 3817 * This callback can sleep. 3818 * 3819 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3820 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3821 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3822 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3823 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3824 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3825 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3826 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3827 * The callback can sleep. 3828 * 3829 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3830 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3831 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3832 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3833 * in @sta_state. 3834 * The callback can sleep. 3835 * 3836 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3837 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3838 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3839 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3840 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3841 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3842 * Must be atomic. 3843 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3844 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3845 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3846 * 3847 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3848 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3849 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3850 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3851 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3852 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3853 * The callback can sleep. 3854 * 3855 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3856 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3857 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3858 * The callback can sleep. 3859 * 3860 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3861 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3862 * required function. 3863 * The callback can sleep. 3864 * 3865 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3866 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3867 * required function. 3868 * The callback can sleep. 3869 * 3870 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3871 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3872 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3873 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3874 * The callback can sleep. 3875 * 3876 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3877 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3878 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3879 * TSF synchronization. 3880 * The callback can sleep. 3881 * 3882 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3883 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3884 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3885 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3886 * The callback can sleep. 3887 * 3888 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3889 * 3890 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3891 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3892 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3893 * The callback can sleep. 3894 * 3895 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3896 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3897 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3898 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3899 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3900 * 3901 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3902 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3903 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3904 * 3905 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3906 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3907 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3908 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3909 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3910 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3911 * The callback can sleep. 3912 * 3913 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3914 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3915 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3916 * completion of the channel switch. 3917 * 3918 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3919 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3920 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3921 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3922 * 3923 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3924 * 3925 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3926 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3927 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3928 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3929 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3930 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3931 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3932 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3933 * must be accepted in this case. 3934 * This callback may sleep. 3935 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3936 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3937 * 3938 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3939 * 3940 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3941 * 3942 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3943 * queues before entering power save. 3944 * 3945 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3946 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3947 * The callback can sleep. 3948 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3949 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3950 * The callback must be atomic. 3951 * 3952 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3953 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3954 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3955 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3956 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3957 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3958 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3959 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3960 * more-data bit must always be set. 3961 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3962 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3963 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3964 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3965 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3966 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3967 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3968 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3969 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3970 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3971 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3972 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3973 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3974 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3975 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3976 * This callback must be atomic. 3977 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3978 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3979 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3980 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3981 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3982 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3983 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3984 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3985 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3986 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3987 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3988 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3989 * This callback must be atomic. 3990 * 3991 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3992 * 3993 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3994 * 3995 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3996 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3997 * 3998 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3999 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4000 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4001 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4002 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4003 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4004 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 4005 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 4006 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 4007 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 4008 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 4009 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 4010 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4011 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4012 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4013 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4014 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4015 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4016 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4017 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4018 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4019 * 4020 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4021 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4022 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4023 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4024 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4025 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4026 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4027 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4028 * 4029 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4030 * This callback may sleep. 4031 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4032 * This callback may sleep. 4033 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4034 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4035 * channel context with different settings 4036 * This callback may sleep. 4037 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4038 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4039 * This callback may sleep. 4040 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4041 * unbound from vif. 4042 * This callback may sleep. 4043 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4044 * another, as specified in the list of 4045 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4046 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4047 * This callback may sleep. 4048 * 4049 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4050 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4051 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4052 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4053 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4054 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4055 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4056 * 4057 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4058 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4059 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4060 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4061 * This callback may sleep. 4062 * 4063 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4064 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4065 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4066 * 4067 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4068 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4069 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4070 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4071 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4072 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4073 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4074 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4075 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4076 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4077 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4078 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4079 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4080 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4081 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4082 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4083 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4084 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4085 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 4086 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4087 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4088 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4089 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4090 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4091 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4092 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4093 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4094 * 4095 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4096 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4097 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4098 * 4099 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4100 * and hardware limits. 4101 * 4102 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4103 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4104 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4105 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4106 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4107 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4108 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4109 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4110 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4111 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4112 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4113 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4114 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4115 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4116 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4117 * the function call. 4118 * 4119 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4120 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4121 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4122 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4123 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4124 * 4125 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4126 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4127 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4128 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4129 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4130 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4131 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4132 * changed parameters. 4133 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4134 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4135 * this call. 4136 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4137 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4138 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4139 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4140 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4141 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4142 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4143 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4144 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4145 * 4146 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4147 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4148 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4149 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4150 * This callback may sleep. 4151 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4152 * This callback may sleep. 4153 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4154 * 4-address mode 4155 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4156 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4157 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4158 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4159 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4160 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4161 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4162 * twt structure. 4163 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4164 * from the peer. 4165 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4166 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4167 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4168 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4169 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4170 * radar channel. 4171 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4172 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4173 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4174 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4175 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4176 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4177 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4178 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4179 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4180 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4181 * This callback can sleep. 4182 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4183 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4184 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4185 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4186 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4187 */ 4188 struct ieee80211_ops { 4189 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4190 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4191 struct sk_buff *skb); 4192 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4193 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4194 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4195 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4196 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4197 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4198 #endif 4199 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4200 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4201 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4202 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4203 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4204 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4206 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4207 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4209 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4210 u64 changed); 4211 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4212 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4213 u64 changed); 4214 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4216 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4217 u64 changed); 4218 4219 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4220 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4221 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4222 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4223 4224 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4225 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4226 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4227 unsigned int changed_flags, 4228 unsigned int *total_flags, 4229 u64 multicast); 4230 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4231 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4232 unsigned int filter_flags, 4233 unsigned int changed_flags); 4234 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4235 bool set); 4236 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4237 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4238 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4239 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4240 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4241 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4242 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4243 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4244 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4245 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4246 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4247 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4248 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4249 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4250 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4251 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4252 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4253 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4254 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4255 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4256 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4257 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4259 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4260 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4261 const u8 *mac_addr); 4262 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4263 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4264 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4265 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4266 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4267 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4268 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4269 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4270 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4271 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4273 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4274 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4275 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4276 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4277 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4278 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4279 struct dentry *dir); 4280 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4282 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4283 struct dentry *dir); 4284 #endif 4285 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4286 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4287 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4290 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4291 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4292 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4293 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4294 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4295 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4296 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4297 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4298 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4299 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4300 u32 changed); 4301 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4303 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4304 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4305 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4306 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4307 struct station_info *sinfo); 4308 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4310 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4311 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4312 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4313 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4314 u64 tsf); 4315 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4316 s64 offset); 4317 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4318 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4319 4320 /** 4321 * @ampdu_action: 4322 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4323 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4324 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4325 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4326 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4327 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4328 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4329 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4330 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4331 * 4332 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4333 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4334 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4335 * 4336 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4337 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4338 * 4339 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4340 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4341 * - ``TX: 81`` 4342 * 4343 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4344 * 4345 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4346 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4347 * if the session can start immediately. 4348 * 4349 * The callback can sleep. 4350 */ 4351 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4352 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4353 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4354 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4355 struct survey_info *survey); 4356 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4357 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4358 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4359 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4360 void *data, int len); 4361 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4362 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4363 void *data, int len); 4364 #endif 4365 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4366 u32 queues, bool drop); 4367 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4368 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4369 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4370 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4371 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4372 4373 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4375 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4376 int duration, 4377 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4378 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4379 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4380 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4381 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4382 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4383 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4384 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4385 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4386 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4388 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4389 4390 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4391 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4392 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4393 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4394 bool more_data); 4395 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4396 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4397 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4398 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4399 bool more_data); 4400 4401 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4402 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4403 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4404 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4405 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4406 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4408 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4409 4410 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4411 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4412 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4413 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4415 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4416 4417 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4418 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4419 4420 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4421 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4422 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4423 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4424 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4425 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4426 u32 changed); 4427 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4429 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4430 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4431 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4433 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4434 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4435 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4436 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4437 int n_vifs, 4438 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4439 4440 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4441 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4442 4443 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4444 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4445 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4446 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4447 #endif 4448 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4450 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4451 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4452 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4453 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4454 4455 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4457 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4459 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4461 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4462 4463 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4464 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4465 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4466 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4467 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4468 int *dbm); 4469 4470 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4472 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4473 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4474 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4475 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4476 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4477 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4478 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4480 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4481 4482 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4483 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4484 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4485 4486 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4488 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4489 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4490 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4491 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4493 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4494 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4496 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4497 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4499 u8 instance_id); 4500 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4501 struct sk_buff *head, 4502 struct sk_buff *skb); 4503 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4505 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4506 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4507 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4508 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4509 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4510 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4511 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4512 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4513 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4514 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4517 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4519 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4521 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4522 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4523 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4525 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4526 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4527 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4528 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4529 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4530 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4531 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4532 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4533 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4534 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4535 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4536 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4537 struct net_device_path *path); 4538 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4540 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4541 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4542 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4544 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4545 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4546 }; 4547 4548 /** 4549 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4550 * 4551 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4552 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4553 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4554 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4555 * @priv_data_len. 4556 * 4557 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4558 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4559 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4560 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4561 * 4562 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4563 */ 4564 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4565 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4566 const char *requested_name); 4567 4568 /** 4569 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4570 * 4571 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4572 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4573 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4574 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4575 * @priv_data_len. 4576 * 4577 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4578 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4579 * 4580 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4581 */ 4582 static inline 4583 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4584 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4585 { 4586 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4587 } 4588 4589 /** 4590 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4591 * 4592 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4593 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4594 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4595 * 4596 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4597 * 4598 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4599 */ 4600 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4601 4602 /** 4603 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4604 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4605 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4606 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4607 */ 4608 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4609 int throughput; 4610 int blink_time; 4611 }; 4612 4613 /** 4614 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4615 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4616 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4617 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4618 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4619 */ 4620 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4621 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4622 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4623 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4624 }; 4625 4626 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4627 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4628 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4629 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4630 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4631 const char * 4632 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4633 unsigned int flags, 4634 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4635 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4636 #endif 4637 /** 4638 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4639 * 4640 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4641 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4642 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4643 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4644 * 4645 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4646 * 4647 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4648 */ 4649 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4650 { 4651 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4652 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4653 #else 4654 return NULL; 4655 #endif 4656 } 4657 4658 /** 4659 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4660 * 4661 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4662 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4663 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4664 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4665 * 4666 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4667 * 4668 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4669 */ 4670 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4671 { 4672 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4673 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4674 #else 4675 return NULL; 4676 #endif 4677 } 4678 4679 /** 4680 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4681 * 4682 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4683 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4684 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4685 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4686 * 4687 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4688 * 4689 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4690 */ 4691 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4692 { 4693 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4694 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4695 #else 4696 return NULL; 4697 #endif 4698 } 4699 4700 /** 4701 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4702 * 4703 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4704 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4705 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4706 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4707 * 4708 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4709 * 4710 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4711 */ 4712 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4713 { 4714 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4715 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4716 #else 4717 return NULL; 4718 #endif 4719 } 4720 4721 /** 4722 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4723 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4724 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4725 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4726 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4727 * 4728 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4729 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4730 * 4731 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4732 */ 4733 static inline const char * 4734 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4735 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4736 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4737 { 4738 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4739 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4740 blink_table_len); 4741 #else 4742 return NULL; 4743 #endif 4744 } 4745 4746 /** 4747 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4748 * 4749 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4750 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4751 * 4752 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4753 */ 4754 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4755 4756 /** 4757 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4758 * 4759 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4760 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4761 * before calling this function. 4762 * 4763 * @hw: the hardware to free 4764 */ 4765 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4766 4767 /** 4768 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4769 * 4770 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4771 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4772 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4773 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4774 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4775 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4776 * 4777 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4778 */ 4779 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4780 4781 /** 4782 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4783 * 4784 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4785 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4786 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4787 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4788 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4789 * 4790 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4791 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4792 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4793 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4794 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4795 * 4796 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4797 * 4798 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4799 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4800 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4801 * @list: the destination list 4802 */ 4803 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4804 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4805 4806 /** 4807 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4808 * 4809 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4810 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4811 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4812 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4813 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4814 * 4815 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4816 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4817 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4818 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4819 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4820 * 4821 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4822 * 4823 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4824 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4825 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4826 * @napi: the NAPI context 4827 */ 4828 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4829 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4830 4831 /** 4832 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4833 * 4834 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4835 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4836 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4837 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4838 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4839 * 4840 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4841 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4842 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4843 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4844 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4845 * 4846 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4847 * 4848 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4849 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4850 */ 4851 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4852 { 4853 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4854 } 4855 4856 /** 4857 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4858 * 4859 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4860 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4861 * 4862 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4863 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4864 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4865 * 4866 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4867 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4868 */ 4869 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4870 4871 /** 4872 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4873 * 4874 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4875 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4876 * 4877 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4878 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4879 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4880 * 4881 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4882 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4883 */ 4884 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4885 struct sk_buff *skb) 4886 { 4887 local_bh_disable(); 4888 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4889 local_bh_enable(); 4890 } 4891 4892 /** 4893 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4894 * 4895 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4896 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4897 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4898 * 4899 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4900 * 4901 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4902 * each other. 4903 * 4904 * @sta: currently connected sta 4905 * @start: start or stop PS 4906 * 4907 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4908 */ 4909 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4910 4911 /** 4912 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4913 * (in process context) 4914 * 4915 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4916 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4917 * applies. 4918 * 4919 * @sta: currently connected sta 4920 * @start: start or stop PS 4921 * 4922 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4923 */ 4924 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4925 bool start) 4926 { 4927 int ret; 4928 4929 local_bh_disable(); 4930 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4931 local_bh_enable(); 4932 4933 return ret; 4934 } 4935 4936 /** 4937 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4938 * @sta: currently connected station 4939 * 4940 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4941 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4942 * connected station was received. 4943 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4944 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4945 * be serialized. 4946 */ 4947 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4948 4949 /** 4950 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4951 * @sta: currently connected station 4952 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4953 * 4954 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4955 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4956 * from a connected station was received. 4957 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4958 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4959 * serialized. 4960 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4961 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4962 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4963 * checks. 4964 */ 4965 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4966 4967 /* 4968 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4969 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4970 */ 4971 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4972 4973 /** 4974 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4975 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4976 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4977 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4978 * 4979 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4980 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4981 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4982 * 4983 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4984 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4985 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4986 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4987 * 4988 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4989 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4990 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4991 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4992 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4993 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4994 * 4995 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4996 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4997 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4998 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4999 * use this API. 5000 */ 5001 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5002 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5003 5004 /** 5005 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5006 * 5007 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5008 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5009 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5010 * 5011 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5012 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5013 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5014 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5015 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5016 */ 5017 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5018 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5019 struct sk_buff *skb, 5020 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5021 int max_rates); 5022 5023 /** 5024 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5025 * 5026 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5027 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5028 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5029 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5030 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5031 * slow stations to starve). 5032 * 5033 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5034 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5035 */ 5036 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5037 u32 thr); 5038 5039 /** 5040 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5041 * 5042 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5043 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5044 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5045 * 5046 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5047 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5048 * @info: tx status information 5049 */ 5050 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5051 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5052 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5053 5054 /** 5055 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 5056 * 5057 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5058 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5059 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5060 * 5061 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5062 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5063 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5064 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5065 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5066 * 5067 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5068 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5069 */ 5070 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5071 struct sk_buff *skb); 5072 5073 /** 5074 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5075 * 5076 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5077 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5078 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5079 * 5080 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5081 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5082 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5083 * 5084 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5085 * @status: tx status information 5086 */ 5087 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5088 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5089 5090 /** 5091 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5092 * 5093 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5094 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5095 * specific skbs. 5096 * 5097 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5098 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5099 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5100 * 5101 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5102 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5103 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5104 * @info: tx status information 5105 */ 5106 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5107 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5108 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5109 { 5110 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5111 .sta = sta, 5112 .info = info, 5113 }; 5114 5115 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5116 } 5117 5118 /** 5119 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5120 * 5121 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 5122 * 5123 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5124 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5125 * for a single hardware. 5126 * 5127 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5128 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5129 */ 5130 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5131 struct sk_buff *skb) 5132 { 5133 local_bh_disable(); 5134 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 5135 local_bh_enable(); 5136 } 5137 5138 /** 5139 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5140 * 5141 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 5142 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5143 * 5144 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5145 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5146 * 5147 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5148 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5149 */ 5150 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5151 struct sk_buff *skb); 5152 5153 /** 5154 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 5155 * 5156 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 5157 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 5158 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 5159 * 802.11 frames. 5160 * 5161 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5162 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 5163 * calls in the same tx status family. 5164 * 5165 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5166 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 5167 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5168 */ 5169 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5170 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5171 struct sk_buff *skb); 5172 5173 /** 5174 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5175 * 5176 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5177 * connected STA. 5178 * 5179 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5180 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5181 */ 5182 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5183 5184 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5185 5186 /** 5187 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5188 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5189 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5190 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5191 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5192 * should be ignored. 5193 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5194 */ 5195 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5196 u16 tim_offset; 5197 u16 tim_length; 5198 5199 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5200 u16 mbssid_off; 5201 }; 5202 5203 /** 5204 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5205 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5206 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5207 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5208 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5209 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5210 * 5211 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5212 * obtain the beacon template. 5213 * 5214 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5215 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5216 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5217 * applicable, the CSA count. 5218 * 5219 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5220 * 5221 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5222 */ 5223 struct sk_buff * 5224 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5226 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5227 unsigned int link_id); 5228 5229 /** 5230 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5231 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5232 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5233 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5234 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5235 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5236 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5237 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5238 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5239 * 5240 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5241 * obtain the beacon frame. 5242 * 5243 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5244 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5245 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5246 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5247 * 5248 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5249 * 5250 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5251 */ 5252 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5254 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5255 unsigned int link_id); 5256 5257 /** 5258 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5259 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5260 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5261 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5262 * 5263 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5264 * 5265 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5266 */ 5267 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5269 unsigned int link_id) 5270 { 5271 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5272 } 5273 5274 /** 5275 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5277 * 5278 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5279 * This function is called implicitly when 5280 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5281 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5282 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5283 * 5284 * Return: new countdown value 5285 */ 5286 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5287 5288 /** 5289 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5290 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5291 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5292 * 5293 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5294 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5295 * 5296 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5297 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5298 */ 5299 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5300 5301 /** 5302 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5303 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5304 * 5305 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5306 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5307 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5308 */ 5309 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5310 5311 /** 5312 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5313 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5314 * 5315 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5316 */ 5317 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5318 5319 /** 5320 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5322 * 5323 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5324 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5325 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5326 */ 5327 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5328 5329 /** 5330 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5331 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5332 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5333 * 5334 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5335 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5336 * 5337 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5338 * 5339 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5340 */ 5341 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5343 5344 /** 5345 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5346 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5347 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5348 * 5349 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5350 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5351 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5352 * 5353 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5354 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5355 * 5356 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5357 */ 5358 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5359 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5360 5361 /** 5362 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5363 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5364 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5365 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5366 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5367 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5368 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5369 * if at all possible 5370 * 5371 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5372 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5373 * BSSID and address is used. 5374 * 5375 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5376 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5377 * 5378 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5379 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5380 * 5381 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5382 */ 5383 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5384 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5385 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5386 5387 /** 5388 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5389 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5390 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5391 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5392 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5393 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5394 * 5395 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5396 * hardware. 5397 * 5398 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5399 */ 5400 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5401 const u8 *src_addr, 5402 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5403 size_t tailroom); 5404 5405 /** 5406 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5407 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5408 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5409 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5410 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5411 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5412 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5413 * 5414 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5415 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5416 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5417 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5418 */ 5419 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5420 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5421 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5422 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5423 5424 /** 5425 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5426 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5427 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5428 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5429 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5430 * 5431 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5432 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5433 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5434 * 5435 * Return: The duration. 5436 */ 5437 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5438 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5439 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5440 5441 /** 5442 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5443 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5444 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5445 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5446 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5447 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5448 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5449 * 5450 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5451 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5452 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5453 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5454 */ 5455 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5457 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5458 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5459 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5460 5461 /** 5462 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5463 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5464 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5465 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5466 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5467 * 5468 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5469 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5470 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5471 * 5472 * Return: The duration. 5473 */ 5474 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5476 size_t frame_len, 5477 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5478 5479 /** 5480 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5481 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5482 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5483 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5484 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5485 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5486 * 5487 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5488 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5489 * 5490 * Return: The duration. 5491 */ 5492 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5493 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5494 enum nl80211_band band, 5495 size_t frame_len, 5496 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5497 5498 /** 5499 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5501 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5502 * 5503 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5504 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5505 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5506 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5507 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5508 * 5509 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5510 * frames are available. 5511 * 5512 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5513 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5514 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5515 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5516 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5517 * use common code for all beacons. 5518 */ 5519 struct sk_buff * 5520 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5521 5522 /** 5523 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5524 * 5525 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5526 * 5527 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5528 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5529 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5530 */ 5531 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5532 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5533 5534 /** 5535 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5536 * 5537 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5538 * from the given packet. 5539 * 5540 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5541 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5542 * with this P1K 5543 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5544 */ 5545 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5546 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5547 { 5548 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5549 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5550 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5551 5552 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5553 } 5554 5555 /** 5556 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5557 * 5558 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5559 * and transmitter address. 5560 * 5561 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5562 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5563 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5564 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5565 */ 5566 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5567 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5568 5569 /** 5570 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5571 * 5572 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5573 * in the packet. 5574 * 5575 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5576 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5577 * encrypted with this key 5578 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5579 */ 5580 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5581 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5582 5583 /** 5584 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5585 * 5586 * @pos: start of crypto header 5587 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5588 * @pn: PN to add 5589 * 5590 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5591 * the packet payload) 5592 * 5593 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5594 * point to the crypto header) 5595 */ 5596 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5597 5598 /** 5599 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5600 * 5601 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5602 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5603 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5604 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5605 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5606 * 5607 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5608 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5609 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5610 * 5611 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5612 * can be done concurrently. 5613 */ 5614 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5615 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5616 5617 /** 5618 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5619 * 5620 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5621 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5622 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5623 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5624 * @seq: new sequence data 5625 * 5626 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5627 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5628 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5629 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5630 * 5631 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5632 * can be done concurrently. 5633 */ 5634 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5635 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5636 5637 /** 5638 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5639 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5640 * 5641 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5642 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5643 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5644 * 5645 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5646 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5647 */ 5648 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5649 5650 /** 5651 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5652 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5653 * @keyconf: new key data 5654 * 5655 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5656 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5657 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5658 * 5659 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5660 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5661 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5662 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5663 * 5664 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5665 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5666 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5667 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5668 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5669 * of the reconfiguration. 5670 * 5671 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5672 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5673 * 5674 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5675 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5676 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5677 * the key that's being replaced. 5678 */ 5679 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5680 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5681 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5682 5683 /** 5684 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5685 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5686 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5687 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5688 * @gfp: allocation flags 5689 */ 5690 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5691 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5692 5693 /** 5694 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5695 * 5696 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5697 * at the same time. 5698 * 5699 * @keyconf: the key in question 5700 */ 5701 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5702 5703 /** 5704 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5705 * 5706 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5707 * at the same time. 5708 * 5709 * @keyconf: the key in question 5710 */ 5711 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5712 5713 /** 5714 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5715 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5716 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5717 * 5718 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5719 */ 5720 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5721 5722 /** 5723 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5724 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5725 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5726 * 5727 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5728 */ 5729 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5730 5731 /** 5732 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5733 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5734 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5735 * 5736 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 5737 * 5738 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5739 */ 5740 5741 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5742 5743 /** 5744 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5745 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5746 * 5747 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 5748 */ 5749 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5750 5751 /** 5752 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5753 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5754 * 5755 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 5756 */ 5757 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5758 5759 /** 5760 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5761 * 5762 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5763 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5764 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5765 * any context, including hardirq context. 5766 * 5767 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5768 * @info: information about the completed scan 5769 */ 5770 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5771 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5772 5773 /** 5774 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5775 * 5776 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5777 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5778 * 5779 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5780 */ 5781 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5782 5783 /** 5784 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5785 * 5786 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5787 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5788 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5789 * while associating, for instance. 5790 * 5791 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5792 */ 5793 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5794 5795 /** 5796 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5797 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5798 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5799 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5800 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5801 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5802 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5803 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5804 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5805 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5806 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5807 * for instance. 5808 */ 5809 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5810 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5811 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5812 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5813 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5814 }; 5815 5816 /** 5817 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5818 * 5819 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5820 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5821 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5822 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5823 * 5824 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5825 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5826 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5827 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5828 */ 5829 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5830 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5832 void *data); 5833 5834 /** 5835 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5836 * 5837 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5838 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5839 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5840 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5841 * be used. 5842 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5843 * 5844 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5845 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5846 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5847 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5848 */ 5849 static inline void 5850 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5851 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5853 void *data) 5854 { 5855 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5856 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5857 iterator, data); 5858 } 5859 5860 /** 5861 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5862 * 5863 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5864 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5865 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5866 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5867 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5868 * 5869 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5870 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5871 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5872 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5873 */ 5874 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5875 u32 iter_flags, 5876 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5877 u8 *mac, 5878 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5879 void *data); 5880 5881 /** 5882 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 5883 * 5884 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5885 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5886 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 5887 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in 5888 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within 5889 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks. 5890 * 5891 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5892 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5893 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5894 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5895 */ 5896 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5897 u32 iter_flags, 5898 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5899 u8 *mac, 5900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5901 void *data); 5902 5903 /** 5904 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations 5905 * 5906 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5907 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5908 * function for them. 5909 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5910 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used. 5911 * 5912 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5913 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5914 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5915 */ 5916 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5917 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5918 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5919 void *data); 5920 5921 /** 5922 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5923 * 5924 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5925 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5926 * function for them. 5927 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5928 * 5929 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5930 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5931 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5932 */ 5933 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5934 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5935 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5936 void *data); 5937 /** 5938 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5939 * 5940 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5941 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5942 * 5943 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5944 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5945 */ 5946 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5947 5948 /** 5949 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5950 * 5951 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5952 * workqueue. 5953 * 5954 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5955 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5956 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5957 */ 5958 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5959 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5960 unsigned long delay); 5961 5962 /** 5963 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5964 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5965 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5966 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5967 * 5968 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5969 * 5970 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5971 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5972 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5973 */ 5974 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5975 u16 timeout); 5976 5977 /** 5978 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5979 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5980 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5981 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5982 * 5983 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5984 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5985 * from any context. 5986 */ 5987 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5988 u16 tid); 5989 5990 /** 5991 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5992 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5993 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5994 * 5995 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5996 * 5997 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5998 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5999 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6000 */ 6001 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6002 6003 /** 6004 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6005 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6006 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6007 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6008 * 6009 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6010 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6011 * can be called from any context. 6012 */ 6013 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6014 u16 tid); 6015 6016 /** 6017 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6018 * 6019 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6020 * @addr: station's address 6021 * 6022 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6023 * 6024 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6025 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6026 */ 6027 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6028 const u8 *addr); 6029 6030 /** 6031 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6032 * 6033 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6034 * @addr: remote station's address 6035 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6036 * 6037 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6038 * 6039 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6040 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6041 * 6042 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6043 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6044 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6045 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6046 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6047 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6048 * is not reliable. 6049 * 6050 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6051 */ 6052 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6053 const u8 *addr, 6054 const u8 *localaddr); 6055 6056 /** 6057 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6058 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6059 * @addr: remote station's link address 6060 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6061 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6062 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6063 * 6064 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6065 */ 6066 struct ieee80211_sta * 6067 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6068 const u8 *addr, 6069 const u8 *localaddr, 6070 unsigned int *link_id); 6071 6072 /** 6073 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6074 * @hw: the hardware 6075 * @pubsta: the station 6076 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6077 * 6078 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6079 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6080 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6081 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6082 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6083 * 6084 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6085 * manner. 6086 * 6087 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6088 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6089 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6090 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6091 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6092 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6093 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6094 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6095 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6096 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6097 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6098 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6099 * woke up while blocked or not. 6100 */ 6101 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6102 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6103 6104 /** 6105 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6106 * @pubsta: the station 6107 * 6108 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6109 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6110 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6111 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6112 * 6113 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6114 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6115 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6116 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6117 * 6118 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6119 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6120 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6121 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6122 */ 6123 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6124 6125 /** 6126 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6127 * @pubsta: the station 6128 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6129 * 6130 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6131 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6132 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6133 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6134 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6135 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6136 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6137 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6138 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6139 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6140 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6141 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6142 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6143 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6144 */ 6145 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6146 6147 /** 6148 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6149 * @pubsta: the station 6150 * 6151 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6152 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6153 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6154 * 6155 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6156 * there is no need to call this function. 6157 */ 6158 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6159 6160 /** 6161 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6162 * 6163 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6164 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6165 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6166 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6167 * 6168 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6169 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6170 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6171 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6172 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6173 * attempts. 6174 * 6175 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6176 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6177 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6178 * them to 0. 6179 * 6180 * @pubsta: the station 6181 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6182 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6183 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6184 */ 6185 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6186 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6187 6188 /** 6189 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6190 * 6191 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6192 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6193 * 6194 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6195 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6196 */ 6197 bool 6198 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6199 6200 /** 6201 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6202 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6203 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6204 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6205 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6206 * 6207 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6208 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6209 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6210 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6211 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6212 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6213 * 6214 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6215 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6216 * set_key callback. 6217 */ 6218 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6220 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6221 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6222 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6223 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6224 void *data), 6225 void *iter_data); 6226 6227 /** 6228 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6229 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6230 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6231 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6232 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6233 * 6234 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6235 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6236 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6237 * in removal process will be skipped. 6238 * 6239 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6240 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6241 */ 6242 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6243 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6244 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6245 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6246 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6247 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6248 void *data), 6249 void *iter_data); 6250 6251 /** 6252 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6253 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6254 * @iter: iterator function 6255 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6256 * 6257 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6258 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6259 * places while calling into the driver. 6260 * 6261 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6262 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6263 * removed. 6264 * 6265 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6266 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6267 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6268 * or not. 6269 */ 6270 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6271 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6272 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6273 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6274 void *data), 6275 void *iter_data); 6276 6277 /** 6278 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6279 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6280 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6281 * 6282 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6283 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6284 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6285 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6286 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6287 * %NULL. 6288 * 6289 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6290 */ 6291 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6292 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6293 6294 /** 6295 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6296 * 6297 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6298 * 6299 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6300 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6301 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6302 */ 6303 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6304 6305 /** 6306 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6307 * 6308 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6309 * 6310 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6311 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6312 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6313 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6314 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6315 * 6316 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6317 * without connection recovery attempts. 6318 */ 6319 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6320 6321 /** 6322 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6323 * 6324 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6325 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6326 * 6327 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6328 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6329 */ 6330 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6331 6332 /** 6333 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6334 * 6335 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6336 * 6337 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6338 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6339 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6340 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6341 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6342 * 6343 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6344 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6345 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6346 * disconnect normally later. 6347 * 6348 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6349 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6350 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6351 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6352 */ 6353 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6354 6355 /** 6356 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6357 * hardware restart 6358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6359 * 6360 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6361 * hardware restart. 6362 */ 6363 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6364 6365 /** 6366 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6367 * rssi threshold triggered 6368 * 6369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6370 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6371 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6372 * @gfp: context flags 6373 * 6374 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6375 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6376 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6377 */ 6378 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6379 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6380 s32 rssi_level, 6381 gfp_t gfp); 6382 6383 /** 6384 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6385 * 6386 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6387 * @gfp: context flags 6388 */ 6389 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6390 6391 /** 6392 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6393 * 6394 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6395 */ 6396 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6397 6398 /** 6399 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6401 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6402 * 6403 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6404 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6405 */ 6406 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 6407 6408 /** 6409 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6410 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6411 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6412 * 6413 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6414 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6415 * a deauth frame in this case. 6416 */ 6417 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6418 bool block_tx); 6419 6420 /** 6421 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6422 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6423 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6424 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6425 * 6426 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6427 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6428 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6429 */ 6430 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6431 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6432 6433 /** 6434 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6435 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6436 */ 6437 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6438 6439 /** 6440 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6441 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6442 */ 6443 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6444 6445 /** 6446 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6447 * 6448 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6449 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6450 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6451 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6452 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6453 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6454 * 6455 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6456 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6457 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6458 */ 6459 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6460 const u8 *addr); 6461 6462 /** 6463 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6464 * @pubsta: station struct 6465 * @tid: the session's TID 6466 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6467 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6468 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6469 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6470 * 6471 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6472 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6473 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6474 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6475 */ 6476 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6477 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6478 u16 received_mpdus); 6479 6480 /** 6481 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6482 * 6483 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6484 * buffer. 6485 * 6486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6487 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6488 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6489 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6490 */ 6491 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6492 6493 /** 6494 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6495 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6496 * @addr: station mac address 6497 * @tid: the rx tid 6498 */ 6499 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6500 unsigned int tid); 6501 6502 /** 6503 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6504 * 6505 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6506 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6507 * reordering. 6508 * 6509 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6510 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6511 * 6512 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6513 * @addr: station mac address 6514 * @tid: the rx tid 6515 */ 6516 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6517 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6518 { 6519 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6520 return; 6521 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6522 } 6523 6524 /** 6525 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6526 * 6527 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6528 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6529 * reordering. 6530 * 6531 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6532 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6533 * 6534 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6535 * @addr: station mac address 6536 * @tid: the rx tid 6537 */ 6538 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6539 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6540 { 6541 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6542 return; 6543 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6544 } 6545 6546 /** 6547 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6548 * 6549 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6550 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6551 * 6552 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6553 * 6554 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6555 * @addr: station mac address 6556 * @tid: the rx tid 6557 */ 6558 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6559 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6560 6561 /* Rate control API */ 6562 6563 /** 6564 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6565 * 6566 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6567 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6568 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6569 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6570 * to be filled in 6571 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6572 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6573 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6574 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6575 * RTS threshold 6576 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6577 * if the selected rate supports it 6578 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6579 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6580 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6581 */ 6582 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6583 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6584 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6585 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6586 struct sk_buff *skb; 6587 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6588 bool rts, short_preamble; 6589 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6590 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6591 bool bss; 6592 }; 6593 6594 /** 6595 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6596 */ 6597 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6598 /** 6599 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6600 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6601 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6602 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6603 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6604 */ 6605 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6606 /** 6607 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6608 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6609 */ 6610 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6611 }; 6612 6613 struct rate_control_ops { 6614 unsigned long capa; 6615 const char *name; 6616 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6617 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6618 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6619 void (*free)(void *priv); 6620 6621 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6622 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6623 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6624 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6625 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6626 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6627 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6628 u32 changed); 6629 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6630 void *priv_sta); 6631 6632 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6633 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6634 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6635 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6636 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6637 struct sk_buff *skb); 6638 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6639 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6640 6641 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6642 struct dentry *dir); 6643 6644 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6645 }; 6646 6647 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6648 enum nl80211_band band, 6649 int index) 6650 { 6651 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6652 } 6653 6654 static inline s8 6655 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6657 { 6658 int i; 6659 6660 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6661 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6662 return i; 6663 6664 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6665 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6666 6667 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6668 return 0; 6669 } 6670 6671 static inline 6672 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6673 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6674 { 6675 unsigned int i; 6676 6677 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6678 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6679 return true; 6680 return false; 6681 } 6682 6683 /** 6684 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6685 * 6686 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6687 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6688 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6689 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6690 * 6691 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6692 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6693 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6694 */ 6695 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6696 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6697 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6698 6699 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6700 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6701 6702 static inline bool 6703 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6704 { 6705 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6706 } 6707 6708 static inline bool 6709 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6710 { 6711 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6712 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6713 } 6714 6715 static inline bool 6716 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6717 { 6718 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6719 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6720 } 6721 6722 static inline bool 6723 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6724 { 6725 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6726 } 6727 6728 static inline bool 6729 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6730 { 6731 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6732 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6733 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6734 } 6735 6736 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6737 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6738 { 6739 if (p2p) { 6740 switch (type) { 6741 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6742 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6743 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6744 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6745 default: 6746 break; 6747 } 6748 } 6749 return type; 6750 } 6751 6752 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6753 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6754 { 6755 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6756 } 6757 6758 /** 6759 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6760 * 6761 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6762 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6763 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6764 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6765 * 6766 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6767 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6768 * matching GroupId management frame. 6769 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6770 */ 6771 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6772 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6773 6774 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6775 int rssi_min_thold, 6776 int rssi_max_thold); 6777 6778 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6779 6780 /** 6781 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6782 * 6783 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6784 * 6785 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6786 * 6787 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6788 * applicable. 6789 */ 6790 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6791 6792 /** 6793 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6794 * @vif: virtual interface 6795 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6796 * @gfp: allocation flags 6797 * 6798 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6799 */ 6800 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6801 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6802 gfp_t gfp); 6803 6804 /** 6805 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6806 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6807 * @vif: virtual interface 6808 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6809 * @band: the band to transmit on 6810 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6811 * 6812 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6813 */ 6814 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6815 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6816 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6817 6818 /** 6819 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6820 * of injected frames. 6821 * 6822 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 6823 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 6824 * of the skb before calling this function. 6825 * 6826 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6827 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6828 */ 6829 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6830 struct net_device *dev); 6831 6832 /** 6833 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6834 * 6835 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6836 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6837 * 6838 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6839 * 6840 * private: 6841 * 6842 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6843 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6844 */ 6845 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6846 u32 next_tsf; 6847 bool has_next_tsf; 6848 6849 u8 absent; 6850 6851 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6852 struct { 6853 u32 start; 6854 u32 duration; 6855 u32 interval; 6856 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6857 }; 6858 6859 /** 6860 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6861 * 6862 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6863 * @data: NoA tracking data 6864 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6865 * 6866 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6867 */ 6868 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6869 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6870 6871 /** 6872 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6873 * 6874 * @data: NoA tracking data 6875 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6876 */ 6877 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6878 6879 /** 6880 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6881 * @vif: virtual interface 6882 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6883 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6884 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6885 * @gfp: allocation flags 6886 * 6887 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6888 */ 6889 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6890 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6891 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6892 6893 /** 6894 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6895 * 6896 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6897 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6898 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6899 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6900 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6901 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6902 * 6903 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6904 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6905 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6906 * 6907 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6908 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6909 * 6910 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6911 */ 6912 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6913 6914 /** 6915 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6916 * 6917 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6918 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6919 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6920 * 6921 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6922 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6923 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6924 * 6925 * @sta: the station 6926 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6927 */ 6928 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6929 6930 /** 6931 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6932 * 6933 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6934 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6935 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6936 * 6937 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6938 * 6939 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6940 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6941 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6942 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6943 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6944 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6945 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6946 * 6947 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6948 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6949 */ 6950 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6951 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6952 6953 /** 6954 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6955 * (in process context) 6956 * 6957 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6958 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6959 * 6960 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6961 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6962 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6963 */ 6964 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6965 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6966 { 6967 struct sk_buff *skb; 6968 6969 local_bh_disable(); 6970 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6971 local_bh_enable(); 6972 6973 return skb; 6974 } 6975 6976 /** 6977 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 6978 * 6979 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 6980 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 6981 * 6982 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 6983 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 6984 */ 6985 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6986 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6987 6988 /** 6989 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6990 * 6991 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6992 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6993 * 6994 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6995 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6996 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6997 */ 6998 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6999 7000 /** 7001 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7002 * 7003 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7004 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7005 * 7006 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7007 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7008 */ 7009 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7010 7011 /* (deprecated) */ 7012 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7013 { 7014 } 7015 7016 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7017 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7018 7019 /** 7020 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7021 * 7022 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7023 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7024 * 7025 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7026 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7027 * 7028 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7029 * this TXQ internally. 7030 */ 7031 static inline void 7032 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7033 { 7034 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7035 } 7036 7037 /** 7038 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7039 * 7040 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7041 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7042 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7043 * 7044 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7045 * internally. 7046 */ 7047 static inline void 7048 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7049 bool force) 7050 { 7051 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7052 } 7053 7054 /** 7055 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7056 * 7057 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7058 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7059 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 7060 * next_txq(). 7061 * 7062 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7063 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7064 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7065 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7066 * again. 7067 * 7068 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7069 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7070 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7071 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7072 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7073 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7074 * 7075 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7076 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7077 */ 7078 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7079 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7080 7081 /** 7082 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7083 * 7084 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7085 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7086 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7087 * 7088 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7089 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7090 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7091 */ 7092 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7093 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7094 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7095 7096 /** 7097 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7098 * 7099 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7100 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7101 * 7102 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7103 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7104 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7105 * @gfp: allocation flags 7106 */ 7107 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7108 u8 inst_id, 7109 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7110 gfp_t gfp); 7111 7112 /** 7113 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7114 * 7115 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7116 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7117 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7118 * 7119 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7120 * @match: match event information 7121 * @gfp: allocation flags 7122 */ 7123 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7124 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7125 gfp_t gfp); 7126 7127 /** 7128 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7129 * 7130 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7131 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7132 * 7133 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7134 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7135 * information. 7136 * @len: frame length in bytes 7137 */ 7138 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7139 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7140 int len); 7141 7142 /** 7143 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7144 * 7145 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7146 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7147 * 7148 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7149 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7150 * @len: frame length in bytes 7151 */ 7152 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7153 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7154 int len); 7155 /** 7156 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 7157 * 7158 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 7159 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 7160 * hardware or firmware. 7161 * 7162 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7163 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 7164 */ 7165 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 7166 7167 /** 7168 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7169 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7170 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7171 * 7172 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7173 * 7174 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7175 */ 7176 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7177 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7178 7179 /** 7180 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7181 * probe response template. 7182 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7183 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7184 * 7185 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7186 * 7187 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7188 */ 7189 struct sk_buff * 7190 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7192 7193 /** 7194 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7195 * collision. 7196 * 7197 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7198 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7199 * aware of. 7200 * @gfp: allocation flags 7201 */ 7202 void 7203 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7204 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7205 7206 /** 7207 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7208 * 7209 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7210 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7211 * 7212 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7213 */ 7214 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7215 { 7216 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7217 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7218 7219 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7220 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7221 } 7222 7223 /** 7224 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7225 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7226 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7227 * 7228 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7229 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7230 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7231 * 7232 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7233 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7234 * a sequence of calls like 7235 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7236 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7237 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7238 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7239 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7240 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7241 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7242 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7243 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7244 * 7245 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not 7246 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a 7247 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks. 7248 */ 7249 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7250 7251 /** 7252 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7253 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7254 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7255 * 7256 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7257 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7258 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7259 * completed after it returns. 7260 */ 7261 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7262 u16 active_links); 7263 7264 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7265